Revit MEP 2010

Metric Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 60 . 61 . 63 . 65 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 101

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 . 114 . 118 . 127 . 144 . 148 . 151 . 153

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 . 181 . 183 . 192 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 213

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 283 . 289 . 293 . 298

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 316

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 . 341 . 349 . 353

Contents | vii

viii .

1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. Finally.Introduction In this tutorial. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files.

2 .

The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. Add basic MEP elements. electrical panels. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Germany. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. and plumbing engineering workflows. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as duct. Add more detailed modelling elements. and piping. such as mechanical equipment. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises.

The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. You do not design entire systems. In this exercise. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. as well as how to open and save them. Create schedules. and sheets to document the project. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. NOTE Depending on your installation. On the Contents tab. templates. However.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. After completing each exercise. So. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. you learn where the training files are located. Create detail views. you can choose to save your work. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. when you add ductwork. For example. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. your Training folder may be in a different location. and tags. Contact your CAD manager for more information. such as templates and families. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. however. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. is located and accessed in the training files location. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an _m suffix. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. annotations. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. to provide a richer and more finished design. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. views. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . For example. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. When you open a training file.

depending on the instructions in the tutorial. verify that Project Files (*. and click Save. select the folder in which to save the new file. For Files of type. enter the new file name. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you are prompted to save the changes. and you can open any supported file type. a list of file types displays. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. and click Open. Accessing Training Files | 5 . For File name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the Training Files icon. if you open settings. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. scroll down. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. double-click Imperial or Metric. the Open dialog displays. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. click ➤ Save As. You may close the file with or without saving changes. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu.rvt and make changes. 3 In the right pane. 4 Click the training file name.rvt.rvt) is selected. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. For example. 8 If you have made changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location.

6 .

Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. You learn the terminology. hence. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. ■ ■ 7 . In this case. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the door retains this relationship to the partition. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. drawing sheets. and phases when you need it. the hierarchy of elements. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. scope. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. quantities. If you move the partition. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and plans. the operation of the software is parametric. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In the Revit MEP model. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the floor or roof remains connected. In this case. the parameter is one of association or connection. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. every drawing sheet. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. 2D and 3D view. and schedules required for a building project. drawings. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. schedules. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views.

The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. For example. For example. ducts. Datum elements help to define project context. and 2D detail components. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. sinks. boilers. boilers. tags. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. and electrical panels. tags. For example. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . walls and ceilings are hosts. dimensions. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. They help to describe or document the design. sinks. and reference planes are datum elements. filled regions.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. When you change something. sprinklers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Examples include detail lines. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. levels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. sprinklers. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ducts. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. and keynotes are annotation elements. dimensions. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. grids.

You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. top of wall. or bottom of foundation. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. schedules. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. section views. families. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. North . In other cases. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. However. If you can draw. and ceilings. and drawings of the design. you can explicitly control them. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. and so forth). Understanding the Concepts | 9 . and types. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. By using a single project file. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. views of the project.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. floors. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. Most often. The project file contains all information for the building design. programming is not required. Project: In Revit MEP. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views. for example. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. such as roofs. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. This information includes components used to design the model. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. you do nothing to establish these relationships. To place levels. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. first floor. from geometry to construction data.

A type can be a specific size of a family. showing. For example. For example. such as a A0 title block. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. hiding. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. each in-place family contains only a single type. or layer the views to see only the one on top. Then experiment with them. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. and similar graphical representation. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. Type: Each family can have several types. You can also display several project views at one time. System families include ducts. pipes. identical use. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. Unlike system and standard component families. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. and wires. a lighting fixture could be considered one family.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. With a few clicks. For example. However. System families can be transferred between projects. A type can also be a style. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. To return the panel to the ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. and for switching views. data and systems. tools used for editing existing elements. project and system parameters.. select the tool first. When working on the Modify tab. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. then select what you want to modify. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. architect-specific tools. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. and CAD files. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . provides requested information. displays frequently used tools. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). provides access to common tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. To keep a panel expanded. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. closes the application menu (double-click). click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. when adding duct. By default. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. For example.

. (Save) save the current drawing with a new name. (Open) save the current drawing. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to..The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands.. (Save As) export the current drawing. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu. (Export) On the application menu. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click. such as Export and Publish..

To enable or disable a tool item. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. enters selection mode and ends the current operation.. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. but is not enabled by default.. to. family. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. annotation. and Walkthrough. (Print) access product and license information. click.. family. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. saves a current project. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. or template file. or template file. provides views including Default 3D. annotation. publish the current project. (Publish) print the current drawing. Camera. (Licensing) close the file. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 ..

However. Clipboard. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). when you switch to another editing mode. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. Modify. To show the Status Bar again. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To hide the Status Bar. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . displaying the same information. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Clear the Status Bar check mark. When you are using a command. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. When you are highlighting an element or component. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. repeat the command. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. check the Status Bar. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition. Group. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Starting with the most recent command. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next.To undo or redo a series of operations. or the Family Editor. workshared components. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. This displays the command history in a list. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do.

Place a Wall. To change existing elements to a different type. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify).To cancel or exit the current command. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. On the Quick Access toolbar. select one or more elements of the same category.

you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window.rvt. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 1 Click ➤ Open. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks. click Training Files. There are several ways to access zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

NOTE As you zoom in and out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. the view zooms in on the selected area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. When you release the mouse button. Modifying the View | 19 . 5 Click Zoom To Fit. on the Navigation bar. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments. click . the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. this is referred to as a crossing selection. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 6 Click in the drawing area. In the drawing area. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.

For more information about SteeringWheels. 14 To exit the wheel. moving the wheel to the desired location. click the SteeringWheels tab. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. press ESC. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. and then using the Zoom tool again. As you move the mouse. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and click tin the Options dialog. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Click and drag to orbit the design. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed.

Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct.Design. 3 Click and drag the bottom control. referred to as shape handles. and select the duct. These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Similar controls. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. Performing Common Tasks | 21 .HVAC Plan . After you are familiar with these tasks. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. When drawing or modifying an MEP design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. called drag controls. as shown. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. display along the ends. Small blue dots. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. bottoms. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. 2 Enter ZR.

6 On the Undo menu. In this example. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. select the first item in the list. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. Move. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps.4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. on the Standard toolbar. click the Undo command. 8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. or press CTRL+Z. All changes you make to a project are tracked.

9 Click the midpoint of the duct. In this case. The duct is moved to the new position. require 2 clicks to complete the command.Some commands. you want to move the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. for example. as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. and drag it to the left as shown. such as Move and Copy. and click again to specify the ending position. After selecting the element to move. click to specify the starting position. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 .

16 On the Quick Access toolbar.Return. Click OK. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Supply. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice. For example.End a command Some commands. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Select Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . 13 To end a command.

17 Close the file without saving your changes. Performing Common Tasks | 25 .

26 .

you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. You can either select a template from the template library. In that case. You can choose from several templates. and geometry from the starting template. create and manage views. Finally. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). 5 In the New Project dialog. and modify system settings. system families.rte template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. select Project. such as the default project units and settings. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. New projects inherit all the families. click Training files. and click Open. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. link files. 27 . the default building levels and standard views. such as ducts and pipes. use copy/monitor. 6 Click OK. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open North. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. under Create new. you learn how to start a project from a template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. 7 In the Project Browser. settings. and open Metric ➤ Templates. under Template file. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 4 Select the m_Tutorial-Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. such as coordination review and interference checking. and loadable families. click Browse.

16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. under Energy Analysis. for Energy Data. If you want to use a template other than the default. you can select it now. ■ For Building Construction.rte template and click Open. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. NH. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. For Location. create another new project using the Construction template. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. When you select the material. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. navigate to Metric Templates. 10 Using the same method. Click OK. click Edit. select School or University. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. (Browse). In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click (Browse). for City. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. review the construction materials listed. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. select Project template. Click OK twice. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. For example. select Manchester. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Click Cancel. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. and select the Systems-Default_Metric. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. select Level 1. In the Choose Template dialog.8 In the drawing area. ■ ■ Under Create new. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Browse.

Click OK twice.rfa and M_Long Wire Tick Mark. and fire protection systems. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 27 Click OK. click Round.00 mm.00 mm. 290. plumbing. and 310. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines.00 mm. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 140. select Identity Data. 24 In the right pane. 23 In the left pane. ensure that M_Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. for 90. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. and demand factors for electrical systems. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project.00 mm. select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Sizes.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. for 20. under Duct Settings. ensure that M_Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. After standard settings have been established for an organization. 25 In the left pane. Holding CTRL. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. under Duct Settings. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family.00 mm. click Rectangular.00 mm. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . power distribution systems. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.000 mm. click Wiring. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.00 mm.rfa and click Open. under Pipe Settings. 110. 110. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. and 140. wiring.00 mm. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. piping. 22 In the right pane. 260.00 mm. 26 In the right pane. for 90. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. For Categories. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. 33 Click OK. select Views.

For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. Click Open. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select View Name. Select Ascending Click OK twice. For Then by. select Auto . select Project. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. In addition.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. From the Positioning list. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. To enable this coordination. click Training. under Create new. select Sub-Discipline. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Select Metric\Arch Link Model_m.Origin to Origin. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. select Associated Level. Linking Projects In this exercise. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. click Browse. you link the architectural model with the MEP model.rvt. 2 In the New Project dialog. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. sheets. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. under Template file. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 4 In the New Project dialog. 38 Close the file. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Family and Type. For Sort by. and groups that are contained in a project. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. families. 5 Click OK.

Mech. select Room Bounding. under Constraints. Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area.The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 If necessary. Linking Projects | 31 . 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North . 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels. reposition elevations in the plan view as shown. select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

17 On the Options Bar. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2. 32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .Floor. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. click Plan View types. 19 On the left side of the view.16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value. click the level line for 03. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 24 Enter ??? and press ENTER. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3.

and when the monitored elements are not synchronized. click By Host View. click Custom. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. and the level 4. a warning message displays. highlight the linked model. Using the Copy/Monitor tool. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. select Custom. click the MEP level line labeled Level 1. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. indicating that an element has changed. click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. 29 In the drawing area. indicating that a relationship is established. 34 On the Basics tab. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. a copied monitored element in the host project has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. and click to select the linked model. If you modify a monitored element. Linking Projects | 33 . 27 In the drawing area. or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab: ■ For Annotation Categories. level 3.Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model. warnings notify you of any violations. After copying. you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. appears above the copied elements. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2. then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. and that the copied elements are monitored. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. for the link file.

Mechanical and click Apply View Template. Site. 36 Click OK. Select Show categories from all disciplines.■ ■ ■ Select Show categories from all disciplines. click Custom. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog. Creating and Applying a View Template In this exercise. for the link file. select Custom. click Edit. right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North . for V/G Overrides RVT Links. deselect Levels. enter Mechanical View and click OK. 34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Custom. Planting. Click OK. Under Visibility. under View Properties. and Topography. of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 7 Click OK twice. for Name. Roads. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 5 On the Basics tab. Click OK. you create a view template and apply it to your project template. deselect Parking. Under Visibility. 6 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Model Categories. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 3 In the View templates dialog. 2 In the New View Template dialog.

Modifying System Settings In this exercise. click the Graphics tab. 2 In the Options dialog. click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors. journal cleanup options. click Training Files. These settings control the graphics. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project. under Template file. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. 10 Close the file with or without saving your changes. notification preferences. selection default options. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default.9 In the Apply View Template dialog. under View Templates. select Invert background color. select Mechanical and click OK. click Browse. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. 5 In the New Project dialog. and click OK. 9 In the Options dialog. 8 Click ➤ Options.rte. and your username when using worksharing. 7 Click OK. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings | 35 . they are not saved to project files or template files.

and click OK. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 14 Click OK. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . including your default project template. For Tooltip assistance. the elements causing the error display using this color. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options. 11 In the Color dialog.10 Under Colors. However. 2 In the Options dialog. and family libraries. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. family template files. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files. select One hour. select yellow. click the File Locations tab. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. 18 Select the wall. 13 Under Notifications. 19 Press ESC to end the command. click the value for Selection color. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. select None. 12 Click the General tab. When an error occurs. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. you specify default file locations. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 21 Close the file without saving it. the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element.

However. click Browse. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. or loading a Revit MEP file. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. note the list of library names. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. select the folder to save your files to by default. click Browse. and click Open. Save. ➤ New ➤ Project. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Click and click Browse to select a template. When you are opening. you can start a new project with that template. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. Load. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. You can modify the existing library names and path. 4 Click Cancel. 10 In the Places dialog. click Places. under Default path for family template files. such as in a large. 7 In the Options dialog. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 5 Under Default path for user files. and Import dialogs. 8 Click Cancel. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. centralized. Specifying File Locations | 37 . In the following illustration. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. TIP To view a template. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation.3 Under Default template file. saving. and you can create new libraries.

and click OK twice. and change the name to My Library. click the My Library icon. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. ➤ Open. 15 Under Library Name. and select it as the library path. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click (Browse). and Import dialogs.11 In the Places dialog. templates. click (Add Value). The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. or families. Load. click My Library. and click Open.

9 In the text editor. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Edit. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. such as bump maps. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 3 Under Settings. custom color files. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. and decal image files. click Places. 12 Create a new project using the default template. 20 Click ➤ Options.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click Edit. 27 Click OK. click the Spelling tab. 19 Click Cancel. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 11 In the Options dialog. specify the new location here. If you work in a large office. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 2 In the Options dialog. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 22 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . This path is determined during installation. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. view the current path. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. select Ignore words in uppercase. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 23 Click 24 Click OK. click OK. If you want to relocate this path. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 5 In the text editor. 21 On the File Locations tab. 14 Click in the drawing area. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Edit. click OK. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Browse. click Close. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click File menu ➤ Save. under Template file. you modify snap increments. 4 In the New Project dialog. work with snapping turned off. 6 In the Snaps dialog. you modify snap settings. click Training Files. under Dimension Snaps. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method.17 In the Spelling dialog. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. In this exercise.. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Restore Defaults. delete sheetmtl-CU. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . 23 In the text editor. 24 In the Options dialog. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. As you zoom in and out within a view. You can turn snap settings on and off. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 22 In the text editor. 19 In the Options dialog. 20 Under Settings. and enter 500 .rte. click OK. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 18 Click ➤ Options. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click the Spelling tab. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 2 In the New Project dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects .

enter SM. snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. TIP To zoom while sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. zoom out until it does so. use the wheel button on your mouse. For example. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm.7 Under Object Snaps. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 8 In the Snaps dialog. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. deselect Chain. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. While sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If you do not have a wheel button. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall.

the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. Do not set the wall end point. and move the cursor to the right. it will snap to the endpoints. 19 Enter SM.. and the wall edges. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 25 Click OK. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . Notice that snapping is once again active. with or without saving it. and delete the value 500 . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 22 Move the cursor downward. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 26 Close the file. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. the midpoint. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.

44 .

go to http://www. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this lesson. After applying a color scheme to the zones.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. If the tutorial training files are not present. In this exercise. water source heat pump (WSHP). you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building.autodesk. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training FilesMetric directory. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you first plan the system. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. and then you create a plenum level. After finishing each exercise. As you create the mechanical system. This system consists of a cooling tower.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. However. 45 . duct system and a hydronic piping system. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will understand the process. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. At the end of the tutorial. methodology. you first configure the linked architectural model. you design a mechanical system for an office building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you can choose to save your work. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. By following the recommended workflow. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.

2 Place the cursor over the linked model. you add a level for plenums. roof. These components are defined in the architectural training file. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. Next. click to select it. and after the linked model highlights. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. under Constraints. and click OK. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ceilings. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_m. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Project Browser. In this section. NOTE When working with a linked file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Room Bounding. not in the MEP training file. click Training Files.Space Plan is highlighted. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. and double-click West . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model.MEP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. This makes the architectural components (such as walls.

Verify that Make Plan View is selected. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). Preparing Spaces | 47 . 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. and enter Level 2 Plenum. and in the Plan View Types dialog. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). right-click Level 2 Plenum. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). Click Plan View Types. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. offset by the Offset value ( 2600mm) above level 2.7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 9 On the Draw panel. and click OK. enter 2600mm. 16 Press Esc. Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and click Properties. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. The new level is placed. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views.

right-click Level 2 Plenum. For Cut plane. In the next exercise. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. enter an Offset of 300mm. for View Range. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. enter 0. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . verify that 1 : 100 is selected. select Design.18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. click Edit. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Default View Template. for Top. Under Extents. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. Under View Depth. In this exercise. In this exercise. 20 In the Project Browser. and click Apply Default View Template. However. NOTE After finishing each exercise. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Level Above (Level 3).Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. For Sub-Discipline. and for Offset. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. for View Scale. you can choose to save your work. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For View Classification. Under Identity Data. and then place spaces in various types of areas. select Plenum Plan. ■ Click OK twice. for Level. select MEP .Plenum. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. indicating that it’s the active view. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Level 2 Plenum. For Space.rvt. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_m. select New.Space Plan is highlighted. and ceilings). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For (Tag Location). enter 0. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Placing Spaces | 49 . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Horizontal. walls. For Upper Limit. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.

ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Name. enter Library. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. Click OK. 14 In the drawing area. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 Select the space. for Number. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).7 Click to place the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.

Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. For Offset. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and then click Modify. 21 Using the method learned previously. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. For Upper Limit.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. 18 Select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. Placing Spaces | 51 .

This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. 23 Click OK. under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then split the space using a space separation line.

2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. enter 0. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. and select M_Space Tag-No Name from the Type Selector drop-down.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files. select Level 3. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. 5 On the Options Bar. for Upper Limit. and for Offset. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .

In the schedule. which was numbered 219Q. click in the name column. 10 Click in the number column. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the schedule. and scroll to the newly placed space. and select Corridor.7 In the Project Browser. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and change the space number to 216A. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 11 Close the schedule view. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. as shown.Notice that the tag updates with the number change. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 15 Press Esc twice. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator.

16 Using the method learned previously. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 18 Close the file with or without saving it. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . place a space in the lower area of the split space. Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. you place a space in a chase. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor.

and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. If necessary. click Training Files. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Space Plan is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . click (Flip Section) to reorient the section.

and click Element Properties. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. select Interior and Reference. but that the space does not fill the entire chase.4 Press Esc. select Level 3. For Offset. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 10 In the plan view. select the space. right-click. and then click OK. On the Options Bar. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. expand Spaces. enter 0. select Roof Level. click in the chase area to place the space. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 6 Enter VG. for Upper Limit. for Upper Limit. 12 Click in the section view. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase.

17 Type ZF. select Space Tag-No Name : Space Tag With Volume. All spaces in the view are tagged. Bounding elements (such as walls. 15 Press Esc. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 59 . 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. under Loaded Tags. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. enter Chase. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. ceilings. enter 225PC. floors. and maximize the view.Space Plan. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . for Name. and click OK. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. the space displays the volume up to the roof only.■ For Limit Offset. Under Identity Data. enter 1200. For Number.

Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. In this exercise. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_m. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. under Spaces. click Reference.20 Close the file with or without saving it. To display space reference lines. 1 In the Project Browser. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.Zoning is highlighted. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you view and verify zones in the System Browser.rvt. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. After a space is placed in an area. In the next exercises. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click View ➤ Zones. click Training Files. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. it is automatically added to the Default zone. which removes the space from the Default zone. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. indicating that it’s the active view.

Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Training Files. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The Zone tool is active. under Spaces. and a new zone is created. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click OK.rvt. you assign spaces to a zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. To display space reference lines. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Occupiable. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As you do this. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . you assign spaces to zones in the building. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The graphic in the System Browser updates. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. the Edit Zone tab displays.Zoning is highlighted. ) or 5 In the System Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_m. click Reference.The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space.

and click Finish Editing Zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. In the System Browser. Expand HVAC Zones. Instruction. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. Using the Edit Zone tab. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction 221. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . type VG. 4 In the drawing area. 5 With the drawing area active. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). Click OK. To view the zone in the drawing area.NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. select HVAC Zones. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and modify the zone properties.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs).Zoning view to activate it. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. for Name. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. enter 2 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser.West . under Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser.Area B. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_m. under Identity Data.TIP After you finish editing the zone. 11 Close the System Browser. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. 5 Click in the Level 1 . you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. You activated zone visibility in the views. 10 On the Edit Zone tab.Zoning. click Reference. indicating that it’s the active view. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. expand 2 . 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. To display space reference lines.rvt. click Finish Editing Zone. 9 In the System Browser. and click OK. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Zoning is highlighted.West .Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and verify the zone in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . In this exercise. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. click Training Files. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.

9 With the Add Space tool active. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. click in the Level 2 . 8 In the Level 1 .Zoning floor plan. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Verify that the distance is 12mm. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. zoom out. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space.6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. Select Attached End.Zoning view. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 15 Press Esc.

Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.rvt. In this exercise. and click OK. double-click Level 1 . Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_m. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Area C.Zoning to make it the active view. verify that Wireframe is selected. double-click the zone tag. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. space. 4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). enter Lounge . you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Front. click Training Files. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. for Name Value. click the corner where the Top. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you verify the building. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. on the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and zone information. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Working with the Analytical Model | 65 .Zoning view. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. and select 109 Lounge.East.

The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. With 109 Lounge selected. ■ Click (Highlight). Using the Highlight tool. you isolate the space. click (Isolate). Next. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. select 1_South_Area C. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. ■ ■ On the Details tab. TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.

33 °C : 12. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. and humidification set point. and air changes per hour. For Electrical Loads. verify that 21. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. Below the list of spaces and zones.22 °C : N/A is specified. click . For Heating Information. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. This indicates the outdoor air per person. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Construction Type. ■ ■ ■ Next. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. select 109 Lounge. verify that <Building> is selected. and then click OK. and then click OK. verify that 23. and in the People dialog. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. This indicates the heating set point. the space information displays for the selected space.11 °C : 32. Next. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. This indicates the cooling set point. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. outdoor air per area. verify that <Building> is selected. Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Area C. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. and dehumidification set point. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. click . you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine.22 °C : N/A is specified. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). heating air temperature. Next. For People. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. scroll down in the left pane. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. select Lounge/Recreation. and click OK. For Cooling Information. click (Shading). cooling air temperature. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. click . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool.

Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Level 3. For Offset. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. open MEP . and other room-bounding components. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Cancel. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. 15 In the Project Browser. roofs. enter 0. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.

and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and select space Plenum 212P. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. space. For Name. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Because this is an unoccupied space. Under Energy Analysis. Click OK. In this exercise. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. 22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone.Modify space properties 19 Select the space. for Number. you verified building. enter 212P. and zone information. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. and verify that the space has replaced the void. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. Under Energy Analysis. select Plenum.

NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. verify that 300 is specified. When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. this option adjusts the times automatically. Click OK twice. 8 In the drawing area.Space Plan. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . ■ ■ In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Level 2 . In order to select a space. you need to select this option. enter 03101. If. For Project Phase. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_m. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. For Location. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. right-click. On the Place tab. for Energy Data. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. is selected. click in the Value field. and click OK. NH. For Postal Code. For Building Construction. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. verify that New Construction is selected.rvt. click Training Files. select space Library 219. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that Level 1 is selected. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). On the Weather tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. for Building Service. under Volume Computations. click Edit. For Ground Plane. For Export Complexity. under Energy Analysis. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. select School or University. for City. verify that <Building> is specified. For Sliver Space Tolerance. verify that Manchester. and click Element Properties. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. and click OK.

If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. and enter 15 sq. verify that <Building> is specified. Under Power. and click to learn the cause for the warning. Click OK. ■ ■ For Electrical Loads. a cooling load. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. click Edit. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. select Specified.Audio Visual. For Condition Type. For Building Construction. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. enter 45 W. click Edit. For Space Type. 12 Click the Details tab. Select Area per person. for Values. Under Heat Gain (per Person). For Latent. Next. For Sensible. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. You have verified the building information. and then click . and click OK. verify that Manchester. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. Select the space associated with the warning. for Values. NH. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. for Values. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. m. enter 60 W. select Specified. for Values. or neither. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . both. select Heated and cooled. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). is specified. For People. click in the Value column. verify that Occupiable is selected. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. select Library . select Actual. For Building Service. verify that School or University is selected. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Location. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads.

Notice that the space information was automatically updated. After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 19 In the drawing area. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. In this exercise. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. space.11°C. and click OK. and can be modified here. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. You should correct the space error in the building model. select 219 Library. or zone information. 16 After you review the loads report. select 219 Library. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. verify that Heating Set Point is 21. under Energy Analysis.Space Plan. The Electrical Loads display as 0 W because you have not yet calculated the loads. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. 17 In the loads report. and under Heating Information. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. space. click Information). 15 Review the loads report for project. There should be no warnings displayed. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information for the building model. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Calculate. and a loads report displays.click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. weather. or make any changes to the model. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. 21 Click OK. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building.

Click OK. Notice that the cooling load is based on watts. select HVAC Zones.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. in relatively small increments. 3 In the drawing area. click Training Files. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . click to the right of the building to place the legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater range. 5 Zoom in to the legend. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. For Color Scheme.rvt. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. indicating that it’s the active view.

The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. select Cooling Load .Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes.Expanded Ranges. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme displays in the view. The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In this exercise. click Training Files. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser.rvt. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. In the next exercise. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_m. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. 11 Using the method learned previously.

enter Space Airflow Schedule. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. Under Available fields. Click OK. In the Calculated Value dialog.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. and then click . and click OK. for Formula. For Discipline. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. select HVAC. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. select Spaces. Select Schedule building components. click (Browse). Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. In the Fields dialog.Space Fill is the active view. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. more category options are available. Click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ Click Calculated Value. select New Construction. select Calculated Supply Airflow. select Spaces.Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. for Select available fields from. For Formula. select Air Flow. For Type. Select Formula. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter . enter Airflow Delta. For Phase.

select Number. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. select Level. For Fields. ■ The schedule displays. Header. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. verify that Show is highlighted. and then click Conditional Format. Select Ascending. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -12 to 12 L/s. enter -12 L/s and 12 L/s.Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. a view opens that contains the selected space. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. For Value. and then select Hidden field. select Not Between. select red. For Then by. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . Click OK twice. and Blank line. In the Color dialog. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. Under Conditions to Use. For Background Color. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. right-click to access schedule properties. select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Test. select Airflow Delta. click the color swatch. and click OK.

and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. In the next lesson. In this exercise. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. 78 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. In later exercises. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0.

and work with the airflow schedule. As you place the air terminals. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. you will create supply air systems. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 . In this lesson.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. After completing the air systems lesson. you modify air terminal parameters. Then.

7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. and scroll to space 223. click Training Files. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 .HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_m. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active.

select the diffuser. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Hosted: Workplane-based Supply Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. type 3600. 17 Move the cursor down. and then select both Copy and Multiple. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . enter 215 L/s. which in this case is the ceiling grid. If the host element is modified or moved. and then press Esc to end the command. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and press Enter. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 15 On the Options Bar. verify that Constrain is cleared.8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. click Place on Face. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. 13 On the Options Bar. for Flow. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and press Enter. 9 On the Placement panel. and select M_Supply Diffuser . the hosted elements are updated as well. Also. as shown. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host.

As you place the return diffusers. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Place on Face. and then press Esc.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Next. 27 Select M_Return Diffuser . as shown. 21 On the Options Bar. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. and click Open. select one of the diffusers. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. navigate to Training\Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\M_Diffuser Tag. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 25 In the drawing area. clear Leader. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 28 On the Placement tab. 22 In the drawing area. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Place 2 diffusers. click Yes. 24 In the Open dialog. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 215 L/s.rfa.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. under Other. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. click Yes. Level. 32 In the Project Browser. and click to select the lines. select one of the return diffusers. 31 In the alert dialog. select Strong Reference. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. as shown. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. for Reference. and click OK.

40 In the drawing area. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. as shown. 41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 43 Using the same method. 84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan.You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and then select the top edge of the diffuser. zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 37 In the Family Already Exists dialog. align the other return diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown. and then press Esc twice. click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. select the vertical grid line as shown.

and on the Options Bar. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85 . Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left. 48 Close the file with or without saving it. clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser. clear LeftArrow. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. under Mechanical. and press Enter. right-click. select both return diffusers. 47 Using the same method. for Flow. enter 310 L/s.44 While pressing Ctrl. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. and click Element Properties. you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling.

Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . at the lower left corner of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Tag on Placement is selected.rvt. 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_m.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and double-click Level 1 . click Training Files. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. the space crossing lines display. for Scale.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 10 In the drawing area. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design to make it the active view. select M_Supply Diffuser . 8 In the Type Selector. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. expand HVAC . click 1 : 100. click to place the air terminal in the space as shown.HVAC Plan . 9 On the Options Bar.200 Neck. 2 On the View Control Bar. and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser.

Under Mechanical . 12 Modify the diffuser properties: ■ In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing.The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also. As a result. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser. type 6000. 15 Press Esc. and then press Enter. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level. enter 170 L/s. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87 . 11 Select the diffuser. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. Click OK. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing. you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser.Airflow. ■ ■ 13 With the diffuser still selected. enter 2400. the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. move the cursor down. under Constraints. for Flow. By copying the diffuser. for Offset. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

clear Leader. and then press Esc. 18 On the Options Bar. 88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers. Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select both air terminals and copy them 4300mm to the right.16 Using the same method.

24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it. double-click System Type. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. 27 In the schedule.Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type. it is a negative value. Next. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ Select Embedded Schedule. enter 210 L/s. select 21. and Flow. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. For Category. under Available Fields. mark. and click View Properties. you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure. and then right-click in the schedule. under space 115. 23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. tile the windows. Type. 26 Using the method learned previously. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89 . Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 29 Using the same method. and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. change the flow for 22 and 23 to 155 :L/s. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). for Flow. for Sort by. under Other. select Mark. click Edit. and press Enter. select Air Terminals. for Embedded Schedule. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. because you are modifying the digital database of building information. type. Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule.

as shown. Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule. and maximize Level 1 . As you highlight the zone.The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number. 31 In the drawing area. select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115.Design.HVAC Plan . pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. 90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone.

Left Return Right Discharge : 14 kW. select M_WSHP . 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Horizontal . zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 10955.High Efficiency . 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.97 W and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 13531.7-18 kW . 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 36 In the drawing area.43 W (approximately 1. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway.32 Open the Instance Properties dialog. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 .3 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. and under Energy Analysis.

However. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. In this exercise.HVAC Plan .rvt. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click View ➤ Systems. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. click Training Files. After creating the logical connection. When you highlight a space. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. including energy analysis. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 44 Zoom in to space 115. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. enter . right-click the title.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and verify the height of the WSHP:Press Esc. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. the space crossing lines display. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. for Constraints ➤ Offset.Design is highlighted. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. As you add diffusers to systems. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_m. IMPORTANT In the System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and click OK. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Keep the System Browser open. You then create the logical connection between the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.

and Flow value. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. System Name.Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 15 Click Cancel. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. Note that the Flow value (860 L/s) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 11 In the drawing area. and the system connects them. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. access system properties to see that the flow value (1075 L/s) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. 18 Click OK. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). On the Options Bar. the number of elements is updated. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 17 Using the method learned previously. 12 In the System Browser. the air terminals are the children. Connect Into. review the Number of Elements. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System.

94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. for Mark. under Mechanical. 25 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for System Name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise.Rename the system Next. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_m. In this exercise. under Identity Data. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 22 Click OK.rvt. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you create ductwork to physically connect system components.

enter 3000. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. and display solution 1. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . click Settings. When you highlight a space using the cursor. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . A Generate Layout tab displays. for Solution Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Offset. which provides various layout tools. select Network. select the upper left diffuser. Select Branch. For Offset. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 4 In the drawing area. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.HVAC Plan. Also.Design is highlighted. the Network type provides several solutions. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). the space crossing lines display.Round. For Duct Type. 7 On the Options Bar. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. For Flex Duct Type. enter 3000.Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. In this case. For Duct Type.

9 On the Generate Layout panel. click Modify. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . enter 900. Click OK. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.■ ■ For Maximum Flex Duct Length. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. For example. Either relocate the system components. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. as shown. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. select a different layout solution. you’ll get an error in a later step. 11 Click Finish Layout. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. and use the drag control to drag it to the left. or manually modify the duct. as is the elbow itself. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct.

The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. Using a flow-based color scheme. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . thus it is not part of the system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. fittings. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. The first time you press Tab. and click to select it. and equipment. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . highlight a segment of the main duct.Flow. a disconnection exists. Usually. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. If the entire network does not highlight. for Color Scheme. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. and click OK.

17 In the Type Properties dialog. 20 In the drawing area. under Graphics. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. and then click OK. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. decrease the flow value by 50 L/s. note the Air Flow value (1075 L/s). for Flow. for Values Displayed. and click OK.Airflow. and on the Options Bar. but not all values are used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. select By View. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select the WSHP. The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. under Mechanical . and press Enter. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .

Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. select Duct Color Fill . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). for Schemes. Under Constraints. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Click OK. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and then press Esc to clear the selection. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. click Cancel. Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. and drag it to the right. Select Restrict Height. 26 Click OK. highlight a segment of the duct. and then click to select it. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.65 Pa/m. Select the upper segment of main duct. for Branch Sizing.21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. and select 400. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. Select Only.Velocity. and enter . select the color scheme legend. select Friction. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings.

pressure. static pressure. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Use the information that displays (flow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system.The ductwork and fittings are updated. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. Using this tool. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.

Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_m. Manually Creating Ductwork | 101 . remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 35 Click Finish.rvt. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. also known as the critical path.NOTE As you inspect a system.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. and select the WSHP. and click Draw Duct. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Plan . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top diffusers to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location.

12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 . Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. NOTE When drawing duct. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 14 In the Project Browser. Front. for Offset. click the corner where the Top. double-click MEP . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. right-click the connector grip. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. select the top right diffuser. and click Draw Duct. enter 3000. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the ViewCube.8 Press Esc twice to end the command.3D MEP.

and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct).Click this corner Resulting view orientation 16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 19 In the drawing area. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. The ductwork is automatically created. in space 115.

Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct.22 Using the same method. You can ignore the warning. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. Branch ductwork in 3D Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. and select the top left diffuser.

27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 28 Select M_Rectangular Duct Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 30 Press Esc twice. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. and then click Modify. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . zoom in to the open end of the main duct.

verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate L/s value for the system. under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. select a segment of the main duct. 35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 40 Using the same method. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then click OK. under Mechanical . Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 .Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click to select it. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area.Airflow. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. for Flow. such as a plenum. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. and click OK. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog.

108 .

Automatically and manually lay out piping. including 2 base mounted pumps. on level 3 of the building model. Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. Create return and supply piping systems. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. 109 . In this lesson. and a cooling tower located on the roof. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. Then. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.

7-18kW . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. in corridor 328. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and select M_WSHP . 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.HVAC Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog.Left Return . click Training Files. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Horizontal High Efficiency . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing.Right Discharge : 18 kW from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_m.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. as shown. indicating that it’s the active view.

6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. 10 Select the WSHP. click the top edge of the WSHP. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and click to place the dimension. click the dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. and enter 600. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 8 Click the corridor wall face.

and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 14 Click Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. as shown. and in the Type Selector. 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. select the 2 WSHPs.11 Press Enter and then press Esc.

21 Click Modify. enter 0. for Water Flow. as shown. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Under Mechanical. and select M_Condensing Boiler : 145 kW from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. enter 2750. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. for Offset.16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints.75 L/s. Click OK. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. analyses cannot be performed. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Create pipes to physically connect the system components.22 Close the file with or without saving it. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. you create the return and supply piping systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. but without a corresponding system. Unlike logical connections (systems). IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. including flow and pressure. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Create the logical connection between the system components. You can create pipes to connect system components.

4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return.Mech 330). Therefore. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. select the 2 WSHPs. Assigning a system component to an existing system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. indicating that it’s the active view. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Creating a Piping System | 115 . while pressing Ctrl. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. As you assign equipment to systems. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. This display indicates that the system is selected. where it is easier to review the information. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_m.HVAC Plan . IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. In the System Browser. click Training Files. right-click the Systems column heading.Design is highlighted.

17 On the Options Bar. 13 Click Finish Editing System. select the boiler.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 12 In the drawing area. for System Name. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You have created the hydronic return system. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. for System Name. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice that on the Options Bar. the System Equipment is M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties.9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. and the Edit System tool is not active. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply.

26 Click Finish Editing System. In cooling mode. the boiler supplies heated water to the system.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. 19 In the Project Browser. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and bypasses the cooling tower. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). 23 Close the roof plan view. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. 22 In the Select Connector dialog. Creating a Piping System | 117 . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.Design. and click OK. 25 Select the boiler. In heating mode.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Connector 1 : Hydronic Supply : Round : 100 mm : Condenser Water Out. under Design ➤ HVAC . and select the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. and click Select. 29 Right-click CHWS. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. expand Piping. 28 Using the same method. enter 0. for Water Flow. and click Expand All. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. and click Column Settings. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. 32 In the System Browser.Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. under Mechanical. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. expand the Hydronic Return system category. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click Properties. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click OK. and click OK. indicating the logical connection. you can view several parameters. In the System Browser. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). The hydronic supply system highlights in red.8. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. When you draw a box to select components. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click to select it. then the Select a System dialog displays. and click OK.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. A system preview displays in red. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . press Tab to highlight the system. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors).HVAC Plan .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .rvt. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. indicating that it’s the active view. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . select Mechanical Equipment.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Check None. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps.Mech 330). you can place the cursor over a system component. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. the boiler. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. click Training Files. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 5 In the Filter dialog.Design is highlighted.

verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 2800. select CHWR. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 10 Click OK. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. ■ ■ 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . or architectural components. It does not reference the architecture. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created.9 In the Select a System dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. duct. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 13 Click Cancel. verify that Solutions is selected. select Perimeter. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. enter 450.

View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 19 In the drawing area. With each Tab. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects.16 Click Finish Layout. 17 Optionally. the flow for each WSHP is 0. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines.75 L/s.

and click OK.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 1. 22 Select the boiler. and click OK. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.50 L/s. and access its instance properties.75 L/s). 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Mechanical.50 L/s. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. notice that the Water Flow is 1. 24 Press Esc. 23 Under Mechanical. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (2 X 0.

On the Options Bar. the Number of Elements is now 8. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. double-click Level 1 . click Edit System. Logically. 28 In the Project Browser.Design.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).HVAC Plan . 27 On the System Tools panel.Design ➤ Floor Plans.

so the total flow of 6.44 L/s indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 38 Using the same method.50 L/s. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .94 L/s.Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. which propagates flow throughout the system. under Mechanical. 35 Using the drag control. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. note that the value for Flow is 4. as shown. you physically close the CHWR loop. and click Cancel. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 6. Next.44 L/s. 34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. access its instance properties. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 1. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 4. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog.94 L/s.

00%. and then click OK. For Slope. enter 2850 for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. For Inset. 40 In the Select a System dialog. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. enter 0. select CHWS. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 .Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. 41 Click OK. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. Click Settings. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. enter 450.

In a later exercise. 46 Click Modify. 47 In the drawing area. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected.45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation.) 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 48 While pressing Ctrl.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. or offset elevations are incorrect. or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 127 . To create the piping system. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select a different layout solution. as shown. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Either relocate the system components. you: ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). 50 Using the same method.49 Select the 4-way arrow control. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.■ ■ Add piping to close the supply loop. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . As you work in the training file. double-click 3D Building. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_m. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. and the return pipes are magenta. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.

draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 6 Press Delete. as shown. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 .

select the boiler. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 100 mm. Click to specify the reference point. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. and click Draw Pipe. select the boiler. and click OK. The connections are automatically created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 12 In the 3D view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 13 In the plan view. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 50 mm : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful.11 In the Select Connector dialog. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. select the return pipe riser. and the lower one is secondary. and the boiler is connected to the return piping.

You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ Move the cursor down. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. enter 381. for Offset.In a plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Add another 600 section of pipe to the right. and press Enter. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 600. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and you select 1 connector.

As you place piping runs that are close together. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. and the appropriate fittings are created. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . select Connector 1 : Undefined: Round: 80 mm : Water In. and click OK. 19 In the plan view. 18 Press Esc twice. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. select the primary base mounted pump. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew.

and click to draw the pipe. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. right-click the bottom connector. and click Draw Pipe. you select the tee fitting.Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. as shown. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select it. 24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. and click the minus symbol.

and when the connector point displays. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . click to connect to the pump.27 Move the cursor to the right.

and click Draw Pipe. and click to create the pipe. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. enter 1200. 29 If necessary. right-click the discharge connector. select the primary base mounted pump. 31 On the Options Bar.28 Press Esc. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

33 Press Esc. Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . these pipe connections were created automatically.

35 Using the method learned previously. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view.Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. and click Draw Pipe. as shown.

■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. and press Enter. enter 2850. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. for Offset. type 300. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .

You now have a closed loop system. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .37 Click Modify. Next. you validate the flow through the system.

you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. notice that Flow is 6. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 44 In the 3D view. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 43 Press Esc. select the cooling tower. 41 Using the same method. as shown. right-click.50 or 50% of the Flow.22 L/s (1/2 of 6.Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. view the properties for the secondary pump. and click OK. When you create the pumps in parallel. notice that under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . 40 Click Cancel. In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. for Cooling Water Flow. 46 Press Esc.44 L/s. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. right-click. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 3. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. under Mechanical. under Mechanical. and click Element Properties. the value is 0 L/s. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.44 L/s). Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . and click Element Properties. Connect the cooling tower Next.

■ Lower pipe (outlet).■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

50 In the 3D View. and close the dialog. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 143 .44 L/s. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 6. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. select the cooling tower.Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters.

Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_m.52 Close the file with or without saving it.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Adding Valves In this exercise. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and is heated by the boiler. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. the water bypasses the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.rvt. click Training Files. When the valve is open.

and select M_Ball Valve . 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. verify that the Diameter value is 50 mm.50-150 mm Bypass : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 8 Press Esc twice. The bypass valve is closed by default. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. Adding Valves | 145 .4 On the Options Bar. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.

parallel to the previously placed valve. place another M_Ball Valve .50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 14 Using the same method. 12 Select M_Ball Valve . 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50-150 mm : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.

44 L/s. Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. under Mechanical. validate that the Flow value is 0 L/s. verify that Flow is 0 L/s. right-click.15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and click OK. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate the following flow values: ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. 19 Using the same method. Adding Valves | 147 . Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. validate that the Flow is 6. and click Element Properties.

validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 L/s. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_m.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and select M_Ball Valve . click Training Files. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 6.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 20 Select the bypass valve. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.50-150 mm : 50 mm from the Type Selector drop-down.44 L/s.44 L/s. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and select M_Ball Valve . The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 L/s. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. In heating mode.■ For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 6.50-150 mm Bypass : 100 mm from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Using the method you just learned. Initially. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode.

and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 149 .HVAC Plan .Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. indicating that it’s the active view. as shown.Design is highlighted. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods. click Pipe Color Fill . and click OK. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. for Schemes.Size. select Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Flow.

select Larger of Connector and Calculated. and click to select the branch. Click OK.5 m/s. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select a different layout solution. for Branch Sizing. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. and for Velocity. or manually modify the pipe. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and enter 220 Pa/m. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. Select And. enter 1. select Friction. IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. or offset elevations are incorrect. Under Constraints. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Press Esc. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.

rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.14 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_m. Inspecting the System | 151 . and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. pressure. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. and double-click 3D Building. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Design ➤ 3D Views. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. Inspecting the System In this exercise. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Using the System Inspector. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level.

NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). An inspection flag reports the section number. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. as shown. This information helps you modify the system design. and pressure information including pressure loss. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. flow. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as required.

select 32° C. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty.Design ➤ Floor Plans. inspect Section 6 again. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.4 Pa. the Static Pressure is 41916. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. you need to validate them. 9 Using the same method. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.HVAC Plan . and click OK. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise.Design. click Training Files. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.0 L/s.Note that the Flow is 1. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.3 and the Pressure Loss is 7125. In the left pane of the Open dialog. targeting those systems that need attention.7. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. for Fluid Temperature.1 Pa. and notice that the Static Pressure is 41834. and open Metric\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_m. and to size pipe. and double-click Level 3 . 10 Click Finish.rvt. Warnings display. and the Pressure Loss is 7160.

all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 7 In the System Browser. and click Expand All.HVAC Plan . 10 Using the same methods. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. and confirm unassigned system components. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked.Design. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. After you assign components to a system. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. As you learned when placing components. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. double-click Level 1 . TIP If you have multiple views open. 154 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. click Close. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. and click Show to view all of the system components. 4 In the System Browser.Design floor plan. 9 Right-click CHWS. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.HVAC Plan . you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. After you have assigned all components to systems.NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. and click View. and for pipe sizing. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. If you place components without assigning them to a system. right-click Hydronic Return. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the System Browser. expand the Unassigned folder. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW is listed. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. For example. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. thus assigning the components to a system. and select Level 3 . This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). 6 In the Project Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. 12 In the System Browser. 8 Expand M_Condensing Boiler: 145 kW. right-click the Systems titlebar.

15 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system.13 Right-click CHWR. Checking Piping Systems | 155 . 14 Using the methods that you learned.

156 .

157 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

158 .

Define required lighting. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 159 . Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

click (Open).04. For Temperature. enter THHN. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. select 90. wiring. 160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ For Material. select Copper. select Wiring Types. You also add a wiring type. click Training Files. enter 1. For Factor. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Name. select Copper. ■ Click New Correction Factor.Wire Sizes. distribution systems. Select Correction Factor. enter 70. speeding up the design phase. and demand factors that are applied in the design. For Material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Wiring . 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. As you place components and create circuits. Click OK. In this exercise you review electrical settings.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. ■ ■ ■ For Temperature. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_01_m.

The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. select Voltage Definitions.0. Select Neutral Required. Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane. For Neutral Size. select Steel. enter 240. enter 240. select 75. select 120. Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane. For Insulation. Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane. select Demand Factors. For Wires. enter 220. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor. select Single. select Hot Conductor Size. enter 120/240. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter 2000. For Phase. select 10000 VA. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Load Classification. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Distribution Systems. For Conduit Type. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. select 240. select 3. Click OK. select Power. For L-G Voltage. enter 1. For L-L Voltage. For Maximum. you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. For Max Size. For Value. Under More Than. For Neutral Multiplier. Click Split. Specifying Electrical Settings | 161 . Note the 3 distribution systems listed. For Minimum. By specifying a range. select THHN. enter 250. enter 50.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Temperature Rating.

you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building. For Type of Parameter. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. click Add. For Discipline. select Electrical . In the left pane of the Open dialog. zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Defining Required Lighting In this exercise. such as offices. Later in the tutorial.rvt.Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_02_m. under the Electrical . then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting . Verify that Instance is selected. select Spaces.Lighting. enter Required Lighting Level. In this case the key style is the type of space and. and conference rooms. Under Categories. 162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Training Files.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Lighting Plan. For Group Parameter Under. Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. click (Open). The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces. and double-click Level 2 . restrooms. 5 In the drawing area. under Parameter Data: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Illuminance. Click OK twice. because the key is linked to your new project parameter. Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser.Lighting group in the space element properties. select Electrical. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level).

and click OK. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.Lighting. note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. enter Space Lighting Requirements. enter 485. select Spaces. 17 Complete the table by entering the following: Defining Required Lighting | 163 . Select Schedule Keys. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row. and for Key Name. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column. enter Open Office. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Click OK. 9 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Category.6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter Lighting Levels. 16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. double-click Required Lighting Level. For Name. Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text. under Available Fields. under Electrical .

which is mapped to project units. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser. Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line. the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name.Lighting Plan. change the sort order back to the default setting. click Edit. 22 Using the same method. 21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Sort By. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . select Required Lighting Level. Notice that as you enter the data. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . for Sorting/Grouping.The lx value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type.

You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165 . which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. that Required Lighting Level is blank. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value. the value input applies only to the selected space. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value.25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. In this exercise. The only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key. 27 Click OK. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Creating Color Fills and Schedules Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter. select Instruction-Standard. you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting. for Lighting Levels. select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 540 lx and the field is dimmed. click (Open). Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. Later in this exercise. under Identity Data. or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Note that under Electrical-Lighting.

enter 800. This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. for Name.00 lx.00. Select the scheme for 450. ■ With the scheme for At Least 200.00 lx. if you select the value for 200 lx and click Add. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Schemes. Under Schemes. Select the scheme for 500 lx. Continue entering values for the lighting ranges to specify the ranges shown. and click (Add Value). ■ Click OK. enter 200. and press ENTER. and click OK to dismiss the alert message. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. and press Enter. verify the By Range is selected. enter 900. 5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ Under Scheme Definition. ■ Select the scheme for At Least 200. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Select the scheme for At Least 20. For example.00 lx. select Spaces. click (Duplicate). ■ ■ ■ ■ Select the scheme for 400 lx.00. then the new value will be 300 lx or half of the difference between the two values you are adding. then the new value will be 400 lx.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value) again. and click (Add Value) five times.rvt. select Required Lighting Level. and in the At Least column. enter Required Lighting and click OK. for Category. and press ENTER. for Title. For Color. 00 lx still selected. click Training Files. 3 In the New Color Scheme dialog. enter Required Lighting Levels. Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. and open Metric\RME_Elec_Planning_03_m. If you select the value for 200 lx again and click Add.

enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK. Name. click to place the legend to the right of the drawing.Lighting CF.Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser. Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 167 . and double-click Level 2 . Click OK. For Discipline. select Spaces. select Spaces. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select Electrical. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. enter Lighting Delta. Average Estimated Illumination. and Required Lighting Level. For Color Scheme. 13 Click Calculated Value. 11 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ For Category. For Name. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Type. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. select Illuminance. double-click Number. The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created. Level. select Required Lighting. Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 8 In the drawing area. for Available Fields. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting .

select Level. for Fields.■ For Formula. select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab. under Condition. select Lighting Delta. and click Browse. ■ In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Header. ■ ■ ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog. 15 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Not Between. for Sort by. at the end of Average Estimated Illumination. 168 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Formula. select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK three times. press the spacebar. Click Conditional Format. type a hyphen. for Custom Colors. For Value. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. click Browse. Click Background Color. enter -55 lx and 55 lx. for Test. ■ ■ In the Fields dialog. Click OK. Click OK twice. select Red. ■ ■ In the Color dialog.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 169 .The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -55 lx and 55 lx are highlighted in red. 16 Close the file with or without saving it.

170 .

First. Create a panel schedule. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Create power loads. power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Then. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. 171 . you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. as you place lighting fixtures.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson.

2 In the drawing area. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 200 lx. click Training Files. select the color legend. for Basic Colors. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Orange. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. You can create additional color schemes. select the color for Less Than 200 lx. By using orange as the color for this range.Lighting CF view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_m.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. click (Open). select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK. Under Scheme Definition.Lighting Ceiling plan. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . In the Color dialog. for the Spaces Category. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 13 Click the Level 2 . indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The red field will clear once Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219. which is the lowest value in the specified range. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. all three of these colored fields will clear to white.

277V.5 fc range is satisfied. 19 Press ESC to end the command. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. 18 Click to place the fixture. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.the +/. the fixtures will move accordingly. The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x0600mm(2 Lamp) . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .5 fc range.

23 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 25 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.

NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area, select the 3 fixtures. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 30 On the Options Bar, select Multiple. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175

32 Press ESC. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Notice the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures.

176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm(2 Lamp) - 277V.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 177

The values in the schedule are updated automatically.

36 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

37 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to M_Recessed Parabolic Light 0600x1200mm (3 Lamp) - 277V. The lighting delta is satisfied.

Note the changes for the space Library 219.

38 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 39 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 40 In the drawing area, click the ceiling grid line as shown.

41 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 179

The fixture aligns.

42 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.

180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System

43 Press ESC to end the command. 44 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise, you modify the light fixture IES files.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures
In this exercise, you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 - Lighting CF plan. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. 2 Tile the views as shown.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181

5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. ■ Under Electrical Loads. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Edit Type. Notice the Average Estimated Illumination value of 521 lx. In the Name dialog. scroll to view space space Library 219. for Name enter and click OK. enter 162.3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.00 VA. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. for Apparent Load.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. enter . Click OK. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Junction Boxes. select 463T5_S. select the top center fixture. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_m. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. for Ballast Loss Factor. ■ Click OK twice. click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Color Preset. 11 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Type Mark.85. click the value for Initial Intensity.■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 10 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. select T5 [HO]. Junction Boxes. Under Photometrics. Placing Switches. for Lamp. enter F15. click (Open). ■ Under Photometrics. and receptacles to your design. click the value for Initial Color. Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 8 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics.rvt. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. 2 In the drawing area. and click OK.00 lm. Notice that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. specify 15000. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Under Electrical. Notice that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Placing Switches. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. click Training Files. select Xenon and click OK. In the Select File dialog. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. you add switches. ■ Click Apply. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Luminous Flux. and Receptacles | 183 . ■ In the Initial Color dialog.ies and click Open. junction boxes. 9 In space Library 219.93. enter . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. Under Photometrics.

Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .277V. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Wall Occupancy Sensor . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.

The element type M_Junction Boxes . and Receptacles | 185 .NoLoad. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown.rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. Junction Boxes. Placing Switches. Select M_Junction Boxes . 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. 12 In the Load Family dialog.NoLoad: 100 Square is selected in the Type Selector.

enter 2750. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Type Properties dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. Click OK twice. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. for Mark. 15 Select the junction box. 21 In the drawing area. Click Edit Type. NOTE When entering values. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. zoom to space Library 219.Offset. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note that Apparent Load is set to 0. Under Electrical. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. note the Number of Poles is 1. for Level 2 . enter JB-1NL.14 Press ESC to end the command.

and Voltage. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Select Load. 24 For any column. Click OK.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 26 In the System Browser. Distribution System. Expand Electrical. Space Number. Junction Boxes. Expand General. This list displays components that have not been assigned to a circuit. NOTE If necessary. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Size. Placing Switches. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. 23 In the System Browser. right-click and click Column Settings. and Receptacles | 187 . expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. and Number of Elements. Space Name.

28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 35 Select the dimension and enter 3650. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 31 Close the System Browser. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar. and enter 3650 and press ENTER. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. move the cursor along the wall. select Copy and Multiple. 41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. Junction Boxes. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

enter 3650 and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 43 Press ESC to end the command.42 Move the cursor down.

Placing Switches.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Duplex Receptacle: Standard. and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. you need to create logical connections to define the topology.48 Close the file with or without saving it. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

equipment. 4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_m. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.208V MCB . You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . zoom to the space Electrical 220. In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. click Training Files. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.Surface: 100A. Adding wiring to a project is optional.

6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.Loads.Loads.480V MCB . #1 Pole Breakers. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Distribution System. for Max. For Panel Name. enter LP-2B. for Distribution System. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 7 Press ESC to end the command. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a M_Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Click OK. enter 20. 8 Select the panelboard. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. for Max. enter 20.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. select 120/208 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. select 480/277 Wye. For Panel Name. Click OK. 14 Select the panelboard. enter PP-2B. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . #1 Pole Breakers. 15 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

which is the logical connection between the elements. zoom to space Instruction 221. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. 20 In the drawing area. and for Category. 23 In the Filter dialog. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. Click OK.Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. click Check None. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 .

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 28 Press ESC to end the command. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select M_Lighting Switches Three Way. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 32 Press ESC. 33 Select the switch on the right. 34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select M_Lighting Switches : Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown.

right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.35 Select the left three-way switch. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. add the other 3-way switch to the lighting circuit. and create permanent wiring.39 Using the same method. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 43 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_m. and for Category.rvt. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 40 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click Training Files. enter 2. 44 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . except without wire. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.Loads. 42 In the Filter dialog. select Wires. Click OK. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None. for Hot Conductors. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 41 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits.

14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. expand Power. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and verify that Load. Expand Electrical. Notice the circuit in space Instruction 221. 13 In the System Browser. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. and Voltage Drop are selected. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Distribution System. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. Voltage. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . right-click on the Systems heading. Click OK.4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Rating.

The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. Click Tags. under Electrical. 22 With the junction box still selected.18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Notice the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. change the Voltage to 277V. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222.

Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated.33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click below the first one to place it. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. for Type Mark. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. Click OK. 47 In the drawing area. For Circuit Number. enter FR4. 40 Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . select Break. select M_Lighting Fixture Circuit Tag : m_Standard. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and and click Vertical ➤ Top. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 36 Select the upper-left fixture. notice the label parameters and click Cancel. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. under Identity Data. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click Yes. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. click Edit Type.

51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_m. and click Apply. enter a comma. Add tags to remaining fixtures 55 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Notice the tags are updated in the drawing area.■ ■ Deselect Break and for Suffix. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. 58 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags ➤ Element Panel ➤ drop-down. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK.rfa. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. enter M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Click OK. and select M_Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None. Click OK. 61 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. 57 In the Filter dialog. 59 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click (Open). Next you create a switch system. 62 Close the file with or without saving it. Click Save. and for Category. 60 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 52 In the Save As dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Lighting Fixture Tags. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. for File Name. 54 Select all of the tags. 56 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.

7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Notice that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. for Switch ID. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. enter a. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. under Electrical Lighting. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog.

206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK.Lighting. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. for switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Notice the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. enter b. under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.

select Electrical Fixtures. and for Category. lighting. Circuits are used for power.Loads. 8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 4 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. under Electrical . 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. Click OK. click (Open). zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a selection box to select all the components in the space. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select the PP-2B panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel.rvt. click Training Files. click Check None. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_m. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. enter 2. and data systems. and click Element Properties.

select M_ Hook Wire Tick Mark. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. and in the right pane. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select M_Hook Wire Tick Mark. navigate to Metric Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. and click to select the circuit. select Wiring.rfa. and click Open. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the drawing area. 15 In the Load Family dialog. The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 19 Click OK. select M_ Long Wire Tick Mark.13 Select the wire again.

add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 28 In the drawing area. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. click the connector of the first receptacle. 29 In space Instruction 221. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. as shown. 26 Press Delete. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. select the PP-2B panel. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown.21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. as shown. in space Instruction 221. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Next you balance the loads for your design. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220.Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. There are only 3 tick marks on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring.

select panel LP-2B.Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. click Training Files. click Open. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 1-#10. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_m. Had there been a greater imbalance. 4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Click OK. click Rebalance Loads. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the loads would have been moved to different circuits to achieve better balance. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. but the overall load on the three phases remains the same. the distribution is shifted. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog.rvt. 3 In the Electrical space. zoom to space Electrical 220. 1-#12. 6 Click OK. Finally. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for Rating. ■ ■ Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. Under Electrical-Loads. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. enter 30A. 1-#10. 1-#12. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Scroll down. 2 In the drawing area. After re-balancing loads.

and click OK. 24 Click Select Panel. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and click Finish Editing Circuit. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. under Electrical . for Rating. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. select the transformer TP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical . 14 Close the warning dialog.Loads. enter 25A. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B.Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. for Rating. and click OK. 17 Close the warning dialog. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 15 Select panel PP-2B. click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. enter 40A.Loads. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.

expand Sheets (all). for Font Size. 10 Click OK twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Body Text. 5 In the Project Browser. Under Header Text. enter 4 mm. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. 7 With the panel schedule selected on the sheet. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. 4 Close the report. for Font. Click OK.rvt.Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. click Edit. for Appearance. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. 6 In the Project Browser. enter 5 mm. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 9 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. for Font Size. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. and open E601 . and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_m. select Berlin Sans FB. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. select Bold and Italic. click Training Files. Select PP-2B. click (Open). drag PP-2B onto the sheet. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . under Other. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. The Panel Schedule Report displays.

6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. click (Open). 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall. select space Lounge 212. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. Notice the receptacle in space Lounge 212. and open Metric\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_m. View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the lower wall. press TAB once. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 1. Notice that the receptacle on the lower wall is not connected to circuit 1. There are 9 devices connected to circuit 1. notice that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Expand Unassigned. In the System Browser. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.rvt. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the lower wall and press TAB once. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

16 Close the details dialog. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. for Panel. notice that PP-2C for circuit 1 is updated. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. select MDP-1. In the System Browser. 17 In the drawing area. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 20 On the Options Bar. Checking Your Design | 215 . click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. zoom to space Electrical 214. under Warnings. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

216 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

and click Properties. 4 In the Name dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan.Sanitary. you create a PVC pipe type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. click Duplicate. In this exercise. In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. 219 . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type.rvt.Vent. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. and verify that Level 1 . Adding a pipe size.Plumbing Plan . type PVC . Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Design is open. right-click PVC . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_m. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. in addition to loading existing families.

select M_Tee Sanitary . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. enter 45. under Mechanical. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.006 mm. Tap.5 In the Type Properties dialog.Vent is listed. 22 Click New Size. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.Sch 40 . select Branch. click Modify. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. For Offset. 27 For the new pipe size. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. select Plastic. under Pipe Types.PVC . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings.Sch 40 . 13 In the right panel. select Sanitary. enter -1250. 15 For System Type.PVC . 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. Cross. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 24 For Inside Diameter. enter 46. 6 Click OK. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 10 On the Selection panel. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. PVC . and click Main. click Training Files. enter 10°. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.DWV: Standard. 26 Click OK.DWV. select M_Cross Reducing Double Vent . and open Metric\M_Trap P . for Nominal. select Sanitary. for Material.PVC .293 mm. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .000 mm. select None. 18 For System Type. and click OK. click Pipe Settings.DWV: Standard. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. Tee. enter 54. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings.Sch 40 . 25 For Outside. select Tee. 21 In the right pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.rfa. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. In the Project Browser. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the left pane. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.

Create the cold water system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. vent.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the sanitary plumbing system. add a hot water heater. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. 221 . including plumbing fixtures. and hot and cold water piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures
In this exercise, you add 2 toilets, 1 urinal, and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_m.rvt.

Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan, including the men’s room (space Male 107), as shown. NOTE To identify a space name and number, move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information.

222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls, 1 wall-mounted urinal, and 3 sinks. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 4 On the Element panel, in the Type Selector, under M_Water Closet - Flush Valve - Wall Mounted, select Public - Flushing Greater than 6.1 Lpf. 5 On the Placement panel, verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space, against the left wall, centered on the bottom horizontal reference line, as shown.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223

7 Click to place another toilet, above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again, use the reference line to center the fixture.) 8 Press Esc.

Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector, under M_Urinal - Wall Hung, select 20mm Flush Valve. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces, and press Esc. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line, zoom in closer.

224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector, under M_Floor Drain - Rectangular, select 125 mmx125 mm Strainer 50mm Drain. 12 On the Placement panel, click Place on Face. In placing the fixture, you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 200 mm and 200 mm from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).

14 Click Modify.

Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225

Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 16 Click the title bar for the browser, and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 17 If zones are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Systems. 18 If all disciplines are displayed, right-click in the System Browser table heading, and click View ➤ Piping. 19 Expand the Unassigned folder, and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary, and Default Domestic Cold Water. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 20 Expand Default Sanitary, and review the components listed under this system. 21 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder, and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating a Sanitary System
This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. In this exercise, you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets, a urinal, and a floor drain. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet.

Training File

Click

➤ Open.

226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_m.rvt.

Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the plan view, starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner, draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 8 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK. Only plumbing fixtures are selected.

Creating a Sanitary System | 227

9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors, so the Create Sanitary System is available. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. If you deselected the drain, the Create Cold Water System option would also be available.

10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 11 On the Options Bar, for System Name, enter Sanitary 107. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 12 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. 13 In the Systems Browser, expand Sanitary, and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system, and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

for example. select one of the components in the system. a toilet.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. A preview of the piping layout displays. The base is placed. at the midpoint of the detail lines. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. and click OK. as shown. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. select Sanitary 107.

21 On Options Bar. select Branch. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. select 100 mm. 25 In the left pane. 27 For Offset. click Solutions. select PVC . 26 For Pipe Type. for Diameter.19 On the Options Bar. enter -350 mm. and for Offset. 28 On the Options Bar. enter 1. and click Settings. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. enter -350 mm.05%.Sanitary. 24 For Offset. and click OK. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 30 Click Modify. select PVC . 23 For Pipe Type. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. select Main. and modify it to meet project requirements. The default settings are automatically modified. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. for Solution Type. for Slope. enter -1225.Sanitary. select Intersections. You accept this suggested solution. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. 29 On the Options Bar. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical.

32 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).Customize the suggested layout 31 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . select the vertical route path segments.

33 In the 3D view. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 35 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. 34 Click Modify. as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

36 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 37 On the Generate Layout panel.

When a fitting is reversed. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 39 Click to select the fitting to the drain.Overall. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 38 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing . select the fitting and click to reorient it. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

40 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. and check the slope control. as shown. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 4 On the Element panel. as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans. select 560 mmx560 mm . click Training Files.Design is open. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_m. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . in the Type Selector. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the horizontal reference line.Rectangular.Plumbing Plan . and verify that Level 1 . under M_Lavatory . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Public.

enter 711. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . select Multiple.2. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.7 Click Modify. and press Enter to create a second sink. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the reference line.

■ Move the cursor up above the reference line. ■ Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. 11 In the System Browser. enter 711. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. Press Esc. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.2. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Add To System.

double-click 3D Plumbing . under Design ➤ Plumbing . and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 19 In the 3D view.16 On the Edit System panel.Overall. use the ViewCube to orient the view. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. as shown. click Finish Editing System. 21 Select the tee. In the System Browser. 20 Select the fitting.Design ➤ 3D Views. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system.

25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). 26 On the Options Bar. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe.05%.22 In the plan view. 24 On the Options Bar. with the tee fitting selected. press Spacebar. enter 1. 23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click to draw the pipe. When you press the Spacebar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 760 mm. for Slope. and click Apply. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 27 Click Modify.

29 In the Type Selector.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 31 Click Modify. 32 Select the double wye fitting. under M_Wye 45 Deg Double .DWV. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 30 In the 3D view. move the cursor over the stub pipe.PVC . select Standard. click to place the fitting.

In the next steps. right-click the right connector. on the Options Bar. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. double-click the section head to open the section view. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. enter 150 mm. 34 Press Esc. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. you add pipe segments to the double wye. for Offset. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting.33 With the fitting selected. enter 305 mm. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.

■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. as shown. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). and click to place the pipe.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. 40 Click Modify.

draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. press Spacebar. 48 Click Modify. draw a 150 mm pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 150 mm. 49 Using the same method. right-click the bottom connector. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. 46 In the section view. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 53 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected.DWV. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. 56 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left.PVC . 52 In the plan view. 55 In the 3D view.Sch 40 . under M_Trap P . 54 Click Modify. select Standard. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.

click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. connect the right sink to the double wye. 58 Using the same method. Click Modify.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the left P-Trap. Move the cursor to the left. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Select the double wye pipe on the left. enter 150 mm. In the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. Click in the plan view.

while pressing Ctrl. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. click Finish to select the recommended solution. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. On the Routing Solutions panel. In the Type Selector. while pressing Ctrl.■ In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. and select a proposed solution. as shown. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye.

In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. click Training Files. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. click Finish.rvt. and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_m. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. adjusting the sanitary stack. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. verify that 1. for Slope.05% is selected. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 62 On the Options Bar.

Overall. 3 In the Section view.Sch 40 . 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 7 On the Selection panel. and click to draw the pipe. 9 In the Type Selector. select Standard. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. click Modify.Plumbing Plan . select the vertical stack. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. select the elbow fitting on the right. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Floor level line. and click Draw Pipe. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 10 In the 3D view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 1.DWV.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the tee. and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. right-click the top connector.Design. as shown.PVC . under M_Wye Combination with 8th Bend .

11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting, and click the flip control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once.

14 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 300 mm. 15 Press Esc.

Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 17 In the Type Selector, under M_Plug - PVC - Sch 40 - DWV, select Standard. 18 In the plan view, click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe, as shown.

250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

19 Click Modify. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks.

20 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Cold Water System
In this exercise, you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_m.rvt.

Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251

2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤

.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog, expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion, and click Main. 4 In the right pane, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, verify that the value is 2740 mm.

6 In the left pane, select Branch, for System Type, select Domestic Hot Water, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 7 In the left pane, select Main, and for System Type, select Domestic Cold Water. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping:
■ ■

For Pipe Type, select Pipe Types: Water. For Offset, enter 2820 mm. To minimize opportunities for piping interference, you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping.

9 In the left pane, select Branch, and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser, under Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views, double-click 3D Plumbing - Overall. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 14 In the System Browser, minimize the Sanitary system, if necessary, expand Unassigned, and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 15 In the plan view, draw a selection box to select the toilets, urinal, and sinks. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 17 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Plumbing Fixtures, and click OK.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. 19 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For System Name, enter DCW 107. For Flow Conversion Method, verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected.

21 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. In the System Browser, notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view, select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets.

25 Using the same method, connect the second toilet.

Creating the Cold Water System | 253

26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is selected. 28 In the Type Selector, under Pipe Types, select Water. 29 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Diameter, select 20 mm. For Offset, enter 3048 mm. For Slope, enter 0%.

30 In the plan view, click to the left of the urinal, at the intersection of the water main pipe, as shown.

31 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 990 mm. 32 Move the cursor to the right, and click the connector, as shown.

33 Click Modify. 34 In the plan view, select the sink above the urinal, right-click the top DCW connector, and click Draw Pipe. 35 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 36 Move the cursor to the left, press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe, enter 140 mm, and press Enter.

37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 100 mm, and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink, and click to place the pipe.

254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor to the left, and click to connect to the main cold water line. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). 40 Click Modify.

41 Select the top sink, and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 42 In the Select Connector dialog, select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 25 mm : In, and click OK. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe.

The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255

44 Using the same method, connect the middle sink to the branch pipe.

45 Close the file with or without saving it.

Creating the Hot Water System
In this exercise, you create the hot water system, add a water heater, and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system.

256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_m.rvt.

Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and verify that Level 1 - Plumbing Plan - Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser, open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing - Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing - Overall. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser, and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 5 In the System Browser, expand the Unassigned folder, and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 6 In the plan view, while pressing Ctrl, select the 3 sinks.

Creating the Hot Water System | 257

7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog, for System Name, enter DHW 107, and click OK. In later steps, you edit the system to add equipment. 10 In the System Browser, the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). When designing systems, a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 12 In the Type Selector, under M_Water Heater - Tankless, select 2.3 L. 13 In the plan view, click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom, as shown.

14 Click Modify. 15 In the System Browser, in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water, Default Domestic Cold Water, Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, verify that DCW 107 is selected, and click Edit System.

258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 19 Select the water heater, and on the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view, select the water heater, right-click the middle left connector, and select Draw Pipe.

21 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is turned on. 22 In the Type Selector, verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 23 On the Options Bar, specify:
■ ■ ■

Diameter: 25 mm. Offset: 2000 mm. Slope: 0%.

Press Enter. 24 Move the cursor up, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 25 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 3048 mm, and press Enter. 26 Move the cursor to the right, and click the water main line, as shown.

27 Click Modify. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply.

Creating the Hot Water System | 259

Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view, select a sink. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel, and in the System Selector, select DHW 107. 30 On the System Tools panel, click Edit System. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.

33 On the Edit System panel, click Finish Editing System. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater, right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water), and click Draw Pipe. 35 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, enter 25 mm, and for Offset, select 2000 mm. Press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down, enter 455 mm, and press Enter. 37 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 2740 mm, and on the Placement Tools panel, click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 38 Move the cursor to the right, and click just to the left of the cold water pipe, as shown.

260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System

39 Move the cursor down, enter 305 mm, and press Enter. 40 On the Options Bar, for Offset, enter 815 mm. 41 Move the cursor down, and click just below the drain of the bottom sink, as shown.

42 Click Modify.

Creating the Hot Water System | 261

43 In the 3D view. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

46 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .

264 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial.

266 .

Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. click Training Files. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. After finishing each exercise. 2 Right-click Standard.autodesk. you can choose to save your work. and click Duplicate. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. In this lesson. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. 267 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You create a new pipe type. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_m. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially.rvt. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. go to http://www. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. In this tutorial. However. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types.

10 Close the file with or without saving it. For System Type. For Pipe Type. structural beams. In this exercise. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. and then click OK. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. and enter Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. duct. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and click Properties. For Offset. 9 Click OK. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. or architectural components. For Pipe Type. 6 In the Project Browser. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you create project parameters and work with schedules. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. Next. under Mechanical. However. verify that 2800 is selected. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. select Fire Protection Wet. verify that 2800 is specified.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Main. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. In the next exercise. click Rename. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. for Material. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above the referenced level for the views. For System Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. For Offset. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Carbon Steel. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. In the left pane. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed.

right-click. 6 In the drawing area. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. 8 Using a crossing window. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Fire Protection Piping Plan . and click Element Properties. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. select Fire Protection. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. indicating that it’s the active view. under Fire Protection. 5 Click OK twice. and then click OK.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Under Categories. select space Instruction 221 as shown. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_m. for Sprinkler Zone. click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design is highlighted. select the upper half of the building.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Group parameter under. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Training Files. enter Zone 1. the space crossing lines display. select Spaces.

including a calculated value parameter. enter Zone 2.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Zone 1. 13 Using the same method. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then access instance properties.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. 10 In the Filter dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. for Sprinkler Zone. you create schedules for sprinkler design. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Fire Protection. and then click OK. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_m.

Obstructed-Combustible. 9 On the Formatting tab. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select 0 decimal places. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Click OK. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Protection Area Construction Type. For Group parameter under.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 6 Using the same method. select Millimeters. select mm. For Units. 14 Select the new header. double-click on each column separator. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select Length. For Rounding. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Add Parameter. select Spaces. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. For Unit symbol. 7 Click OK. and on the ribbon. 10 In the Format dialog. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. enter Maximum Spacing. The schedule displays. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Name. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. For Type of Parameter. 15 In the new row: ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. enter Light. and click Field Format. indicating that it’s the active view. click the Formatting tab. For Key name.Design is highlighted. 11 Click OK twice. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Fire Protection. for Name. Select Schedule keys. Click OK. select Maximum Spacing.Fire Protection Piping Plan .

Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. enter Sprinkler Schedule. select Spaces. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing Maximum Coverage Area Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. enter 4575. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. For Name. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Extra. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 40. Click OK.■ ■ In the Maximum Spacing column.

double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing ■ ■ Click Calculated Value. select Minimum Sprinklers. In the Fields dialog. and click Field Format. For Type. select Common. For Discipline. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Rounding. select Number. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. enter Minimum Sprinklers. For Formula. select Area. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. select 0 decimal place. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Click OK. and click OK.Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. 20 On the Formatting tab. under Available fields. click . Enter the formula operator / after Area. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Units. 19 Click the Formatting tab. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . select Fixed.

click Edit. and then click Field Format. and click View Properties. Select Header and Blank line. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. and select Totals only. select Number. For Fields. for Sort by. Under Field formatting. select Level. verify that Use default settings is selected. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System .Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. For Then by (second instance). select Sprinkler Zone. and then select Hidden field. under Other. ■ In the Format dialog. select Level. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by. Select Header and Blank line. 26 Click OK 3 times. At the bottom of the dialog. select Sprinkler Zone. select Hidden field. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Grand totals. for Sorting/Grouping. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Fields.

For Category. delete the word Maximum. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Grand totals. select Calculate totals. and select Totals only. for Fields. for Embedded Schedule. select Level equals Level 2. for Filter. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. System Name. 30 Click OK twice. and click View Properties. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and Count. double-click Type. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column.27 In the drawing area. for Filter by. click Edit. The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Sprinklers. On the Formatting tab. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Embedded Schedule. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. under Other. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. Under Field formatting. for Available fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. right-click the schedule. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. select Count. and click View Properties.

and click OK. and the spacing parameter values are evident.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . select space 221 Instruction. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Unobstructed. for Protection Area Construction Type. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. select space 221 Instruction. select Ordinary.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. for Protection Area Construction Type. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 44 In the schedule. but their values are not determined. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . As a result. 41 In the plan view.Fire Protection Plan Design. Unobstructed. Unobstructed. double-click FP . you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Light. 50 Access the instance properties. 48 In the floor plan. and access the instance properties. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK. under Identity Data. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 43 Click Cancel. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

As you place the sprinklers. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. 279 . NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. By following the recommended workflow.autodesk. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. methodology. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. and double-click Level 2 . you will understand the process. click Training Files. you can choose to save your work. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you create the system. At the end of this tutorial. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. After finishing each exercise.rvt. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Metric directory. go to http://www. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.

5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. When this happens. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. When there is a small misalignment.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 3 In the Project Browser. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail.

and 207. 11 In the drawing area. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. Also. select the sprinklers that you placed. verify that Constrain is cleared. 206. and click to place 3 sprinklers. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. 13 On the Options Bar. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 205. while pressing Ctrl. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. 10 Press Esc twice. and select M_Sprinkler-Pendent-Hosted : 15mm Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 9 In space Instruction 202. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. as shown.

Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section.Design.15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 17 In the Project Browser. and then press Esc.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Next. and 200C). you place non-hosted sprinklers. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. open Design ➤ FP . Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. 200B. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. specify a vertical offset. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 18 Type WT. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule.Fire Protection Piping Plan . as shown. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally.

enter 11. and press Enter. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. In this exercise. In the next exercise. for Offset. 25 Click OK.19 In the floor plan. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. 29 Press Esc. Notice that the schedule updates. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify Creating a Piping System | 283 . 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. For Number. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.FP_Ceiling view. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . and click Element Properties. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. enter 4100. and with piping (physical connection). 22 In the 200A Corridor space. After creating the logical connection. enter 2900 mm.0. This number is determined in the schedule. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. under Constraints. and select M_Sprinkler-Upright : 15mm Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. you adjust the offset. Next. move the cursor to the right. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected.

This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. as shown. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . As you assign sprinklers to systems.rvt. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. However. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_m. and select Piping. 5 Right-click the header. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing.Design is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. Unlike logical connections (systems). click View ➤ Systems. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. click Training Files. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder.Fire Protection Plan .

The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. press Tab. within the Piping Systems folder. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. Next. 11 With the system still selected. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. named Fire Protection Wet. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet system logically connects the sprinklers. In the System Browser. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet . Creating a Piping System | 285 . place the cursor over a sprinkler. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and click Select. and select the system. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser.8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. double-click the Fire Protection Wet system listing to view the list of sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. indicating the logical connection. select an initial piping layout. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.

In the left pane. 13 In the System Browser. and a piping layout preview displays. 22 On the Options Bar. For Pipe Type. for System Name. 19 Click OK. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. as shown. enter FP Wet_Zone2. The Generate Layout tools are activated.Wet is selected. click Solutions. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. enter -3650. for Diameter. click Settings. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. verify that Main is selected. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and number of elements in the system. providing system editing tools. For Offset. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 15 In the drawing area. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 2800 mm above level 2. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . verify that 2800. 23 For Offset.The Edit Piping System panel displays. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. system equipment. click Place Base. these settings will convert the base component to a riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (2800 mm). 14 Click Finish Editing System. select 150 mm.0 is specified. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. select Branch. When the layout is finished. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. 12 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar.

In general. A (parallel movement control) displays. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. and select solution 4. On the Generate Layout panel. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. and green represents branch lines). verify that Network is selected. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions.25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. (elbow control) ■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Creating a Piping System | 287 .

as shown. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 32 If necessary. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. 29 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe.28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. select a different layout solution. or that offset elevations are incorrect. IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Room 214 3D Fire Protection. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. Either relocate the system components. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated.

2 Zoom in.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then you create piping to physically connect them.rvt.Design is highlighted. Next. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. 3 If necessary. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Fire Protection Piping Plan . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. click Training Files. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_m. In the left pane of the Open dialog.33 Close the file with or without saving it. and various manual pipe creation tools. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. the Connect Into tool. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

and so on) are logically connected by a system. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. click Finish Editing System. The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. or a system component to display system tools. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. 9 On the Edit System panel. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers in Corridor 200A as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). you can select the pipe or duct. 8 In the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. and pipe or duct is created. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . radiators. air terminals. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. mechanical equipment. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. 5 In the drawing area. click Add To System.

20 Open Design ➤ FP . and then tile the views. for Solution Type. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 14 Close the System Browser. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the spaces at the right end of the corridor. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 21 In the Piping Plan. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 12 On the Options Bar. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 23 View the result in the 3D view. verify that Network is selected. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. verify that Solutions is selected. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 7 sprinklers. 13 Click Finish Layout. and select solution 5. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.11 On the Generate Layout panel.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler.

and click Draw Pipe. Layout in 2D 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and then press Esc. for Offset. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . draw pipe from the remaining unconnected sprinklers to the main pipe. right-click. select 2800. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. 27 On the Options Bar.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel.24 In the Piping Plan. 28 In the drawing area. 29 Using the same method.

2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner.Fire Protection Piping Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system.Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. Because the whole system highlights. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_m. Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.rvt.Design is highlighted. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. for Scale. select 1 : 50. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 31 In the plan view. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. indicating that it’s the active view. ■ Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 293 .

6 Press Esc. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . double-click on the section head to open the section view. 8 Right-click. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. and click View Properties.

15 Press Spacebar. Click OK.9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 19 Make Level 2 . enter FP Section_Stair.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair. and click Draw Pipe.Fire Protection Plan . drag the top section boundary line up. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 10 In the Project Browser. select MEP Section.Design. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . Under Identity Data. and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 13 Select the elbow fitting. 17 Move the cursor up. 22 In the drawing area. and then click Modify. For View Classification. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for View Name. click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown. select Design. and click Apply Default View Template. 14 Select the tee fitting. enter 2135. 12 If necessary. For Default View Template. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295 . right-click Design ➤ FP . for Sub-Discipline. select FP .Surface Mounted : from the drop-down list. 18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and press Enter. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Design the active view. and then right-click the top connector. and select Hose Reel Cabinet .

and then click Modify. 25 Verify that Fire Protection .Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar. 24 Select the cabinet. verify that Automatically Connect is active.23 In the section view. zoom to the hose reel cabinet. and click Draw Pipe. for Diameter. select . 296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps).

31 In the alert dialog. and click Open. and then click Modify. 32 In the Open dialog. verify that M_Gate Valve . click Yes to load a family.rfa.29 Close the section view. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet. as shown. A 50 mm gate valve is placed in the 50 mm diameter pipe. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.50 mm is selected. navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Gate Valve 50-300 mm. Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297 . 33 In the Type Selector.

You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers. you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Modifying Pipe Diameters In this exercise.35 Open 3D Fire Protection. you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_m. click Training Files.Design ➤ 3D Views. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view.rvt. 298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally.

Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers. 7 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet). or width. 6 In the Filter dialog. width. Changing the diameter. starting at the lower left corner of the wing. 4 In the floor plan view. click Check None. and because the design specifications require a 25mm diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers. for Diameter. and click OK. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299 . 8 Click Modify. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter.NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter. or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. select Pipe Fittings and Pipes. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. select 25mm. 5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. All selected piping is now 1" diameter. height. width. and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. it’s more efficient to specify 25mm diameter for all pipe runs. or height.

Press Esc. Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view. 12 If necessary.Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view. select the linked architectural file. click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog. They display only in the view in which they were placed. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. Clear Leader. 18 In the 3D view. . and after each segment highlights. 14 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Horizontal is selected. 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 13 Navigate to Training\Metric\05_Fire Protection Systems\M_Pipe Size Tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments. select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet. 17 On the View Control Bar. NOTE Tags are view specific. zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. click to place the tag.rfa. and click Open. By hiding the linked file.

and when the section highlights. press Tab. for Diameter.19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler. The main piping is selected and displays in red. select 100mm. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. 21 On the Options Bar. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segment. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301 .

23 Close the 3D view. and then tag the piping as shown. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 205.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . as shown. change the diameter of the other top segments to 40mm to accommodate sprinklers. and maximize the floor plan. select 40mm. 24 In the drawing area. for Diameter. 25 On the Options Bar. The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method.

For additional practice. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. You added tags to pipes. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. you created a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems.rvt file located in the Metric ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_m. In this exercise. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter.

304 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. create details. 305 . add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

rvt. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.Design ➤ Floor Plans. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. matchlines. under Floor Plans. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. and click Properties. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_m. dependent views. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. and apply a view template. 307 . enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and click Rename. click Training Files. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and view references. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Copy of Level 1. right-click Level 1 HVAC Plan. If the view included detail graphics. 2 In the Project Browser. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and click OK.

and click Apply Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. create dependent views for areas B and C. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 9 Click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and then press Esc. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. more focused. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. and click OK. 10 In the drawing area. 7 Close the file without saving. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.rvt. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_m. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1 : 100 scale. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click OK. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. views and put them on the sheet. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. as shown. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 4 Using the same method.

select black. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references. select Double Dash . 14 Click Finish Matchline. 19 In the drawing area. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. and click OK. In the Color dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. click the current value. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . For Line Weight. select 11. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and then press Esc. For Line Pattern.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference.

apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 21 Using the same method. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.20 Select the upper view reference and. for Target view. 25 Using the same method. on the Options Bar. as shown. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

27 Using the same method. enter Plumbing Isometric . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. and click Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view.rvt. for View Name. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . and zoom to each of the view references. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser.Domestic Water. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and select the section box. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 4 In the Project Browser. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_m. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. click Training Files. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. For Default View Template. select Plumbing Isometric. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 2 Zoom in. right-click 3D Plumbing. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.

9 Highlight a segment of the cold water (blue) piping. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. 7 Select the WSHPs in the view.Domestic Water. For Pattern. for View Classification. and click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. select Dash. The section crop lines no longer display. select 3. and click to select it. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Plumbing. select Documentation. 11 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Sub-Discipline. and then click OK. Click OK. Click Apply. and click Apply Default View Template. right-click Plumbing Isometric .■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 10 Right-click. press Tab three times to highlight the pipe run. 8 Zoom in to the plumbing system.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . press Tab 3 times. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dot 1mm. 13 Using the same method. and click to select it.12 Highlight the vertical hot water segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. and click to select it. 15 Right-click.14 Highlight a segment of horizontal sanitary pipe. as shown). 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

and in the Type Selector. ■ ■ Add a spot slope annotation 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. verify that Common is selected. and in the view properties. On the View Control Bar. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. specify Plumbing . 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.5mm Arial. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. For Slope. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 21 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ For Discipline.16 Press Esc. 19 Using methods learned previously. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 315 . rename the new view Plumbing Isometric .Isometric.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate 3D Plumbing. 18 Label the fixtures as shown. click on the Format value. select 1. and for Default View Template. Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.

27 Close the file with or without saving it. as shown. 24 Click on the horizontal pipe from the two end toilets to select it. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_m. 26 Press Esc twice. for Rounding. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. When the view is associated with a sheet. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click OK twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 25 Move the cursor above the pipe. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. select To the nearest 10. indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use a plan view to create a callout view. click Training Files.■ In the Format dialog.rvt. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. and click to place the spot slope annotation. and then place the callout view on a sheet.

and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 5 On the Options Bar. select 1 : 50. Creating Callout Views | 317 . and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head).2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom-right section of the plan). for Scale. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Expand the Callout Boundary category and. for Line Weight. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. under Sheets (all). using the same method. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. drag it to the sheet. double-click M601 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ For the Callout Boundary category. select 5. and select the viewport.

enter WSHP PART PLAN. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 17 In the Project Browser. Ductwork in coarse detail Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Callout Views | 319 . The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. for View Name. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. For Default View Template. right-click the callout view.15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. For Title on Sheet. Click OK.

19 Zoom in to the area near the stairs in the lower-left corner space. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 53 Duct Section. 21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout.

under Names. and click Rename. 29 Close the file with or without saving it.24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. Creating Callout Views | 321 . 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.

322 .

as shown. Creating Annotations In this exercise. duct tags. work with model-based components. create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. click Training Files.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. symbols. linetypes.rvt. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and annotation to create a legend. 323 . you learn how to: ■ ■ ■ add text notes. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_m.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). and select 1. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. 8 With the text still selected.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 9 Press Esc twice. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

and a segment of rectangular duct. Use the leader segment grips to create leader segments from the text box. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. Creating Annotations | 325 . Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Add leaders 10 Select the text box. a return diffuser. and then click Right Straight. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. as shown. select a supply diffuser. 16 In the drawing area. verify that Leader is cleared. a segment of round duct. The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight.

select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. as shown. 21 In the Load Family dialog.17 Click Modify. and click Open. clear Leader. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 20 In the Tags dialog. click Load.rfa. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. select M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. for Ducts. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.rfa and M_Flex Duct Tag Round. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. under Category. 22 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. verify that the Loaded Tag is M_Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . If necessary. 25 In the drawing area. 24 On the Options Bar. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK.

30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. Creating Annotations | 327 . specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. select Horizontal. Leader. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. and Attached End. 31 On the Options Bar. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. and then press Esc. 32 In the drawing area. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

33 On the Options Bar. 34 In the drawing area. for Leader. 36 Press Esc twice. select Free End. as shown. then click to the right to place the leader as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.

40 Using the method learned previously. and all elements of that type are affected. for Leader Arrowhead. click Training Files.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. 37 In the drawing area. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. select Arrow Filled 15 Degree. In the left pane of the Open dialog. lay out. and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_m.Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. Creating Dimensions | 329 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. That’s because you changed a type property. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. not simply an instance property. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and click OK.

select the dimension line. On the Options Bar. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines.5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 12 Click EQ. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 14 Using the same method. and then select the interior face of the wall. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 13 Press Esc. 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish.

annotation symbols. and offset them from the wall. 17 Press Esc. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_m. click the 3 interior locks on the line.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. linework. Creating a Legend In this exercise. click Training Files. and notes.Lock dimensions between fixtures 15 Select the center dimension line. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend | 331 . enter 2430. 19 Select the dimension value (3376. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Using the same methods.9). you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 18 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 16 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures.

8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 600x600 . select Air Terminals : M_Supply Diffuser . and select 1.Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.200 Neck. For Scale. ■ 9 In the drawing area. select 1 : 50. For View. 5 Click in the drawing area. click below the title to place the diffuser.Sidewall : 450 x 200 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 600 x 600 Face 300 x 300 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . enter Diffuser Legend. 10 Using the same method. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. select Floor Plan. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK.

Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click next to the top diffuser. Creating a Legend | 333 . and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. and select 1.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.11 Press Esc. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area.

23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 27 While pressing Ctrl.RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Select the component’s break line. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. The selected detail lines are now thin.DROP and its text note. 26 Press Esc. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 21 Press Esc. and then press Esc. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE .

34 Using the method learned previously.30 Select Spot Elevation . mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. enter E. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. and then click Modify.MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. Creating a Legend | 335 . 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 336 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . and select Title w Line . 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected.

Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.113 East elevation view.rvt. A drafting view using detail components. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_m. A detail callout that references another view. 337 . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. detail groups. click Training Files. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.

select each of the 2 panelboards. and then modify and align the views. and click to place it. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 East on the sheet. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. Next. clear Leader. 7 Drag the Power Riser . Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 4 On the Options Bar. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 8 Using the same method. 5 In the drawing area. place Power Riser .

Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area.9 Press Esc. and click OK. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 339 . and click Activate View. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Title on Sheet. 13 Right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram. under Identity Data. select the 113 North view. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. giving the appearance of a single view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. right-click. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View.

right-click. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. select the 113 East elevation view. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. and click Activate View. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. you add wiring to the diagram. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. In the next exercise.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. 19 Select the Level 1 line.No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 22 Press Esc. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. and select Title w Line . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram.

indicating that it’s the active view. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. 2 Close the Project Browser. and click OK. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. notice that there are no snaps active. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.rvt. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. enter Electrical Power. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. click New. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). select 6. verify that Chain is selected. click Training Files. 8 On the Options Bar. expand Lines. and then click OK. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. Under Modify Subcategories. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_m. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. In the New Subcategory dialog.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. In the Line Styles dialog. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . for Line Weight. for Name. as shown. As you draw.Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.113 North view.

10 Press Esc. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. as shown. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. for Offset. enter 3mm.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. so that the result is as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. as shown. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc).20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

select Multiple.25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 29 Click Modify. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 31 While pressing Ctrl. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 . Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 Click above the cap. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and select 1. 33 On the Options Bar.

35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 36 Press Esc. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

0. and press Enter.Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. you can ensure that they stay together. and then press Esc. Press Esc. enter 3. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . You enter exact values for each line length. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. enter 12. Using the same method. 44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line. for Offset. 40 Press Esc. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 7. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 42 On the Options Bar. click on the length dimension value. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. change the length of the bottom line to 3. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 39 Move the cursor to the right. and press Enter. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 52 Select the detail group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group.45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. 50 With the group selected. 46 In the Project Browser. select all 3 lines. enter Ground. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 51 Using the method learned previously. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. for Name. expand Groups ➤ Detail. while pressing Ctrl. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 47 In the drawing area. 54 Select the group. and then press Esc. TP-2B.

You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. In later exercises.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and will place it on sheet E01.

expand Documentation ➤ HVAC . right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. Back. 10 In the View Templates dialog: ■ For Show Type. and then press Esc. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_m. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 In the Rename View dialog. Apply a view template 9 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Walkthroughs. and double click Typical Make Up Air. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail.rvt. 2 Zoom in to view the section. 4 In the Project Browser. 7 Right-click the ViewCube. 8 On the ViewCube. select 3D Views. for Name. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. 3 Select the section box. and click Rename. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. and click Apply View Template. and Left sides converge. click Home.Duct ➤ Sections (Building Section). click Training Files. 5 Right-click the copy.

select 3D HVAC Iso. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.■ ■ Under Names. Move the cursor down and to the left. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and select 5mm Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. 15 Using the same method. label the connecting duct 200x150 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Typical. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Right). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the second leader point. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

select Crop Region Visible. and under Extents.18 Press Esc. as shown. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and then click OK. 19 Complete the text labels. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 23 Click on the crop region. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. To rotate and reposition a text label. under Extents. as shown. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area.

30 On the View Control Bar. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.25 Click OK. click Training Files. and position the elements as shown 31 Right-click the view.rvt. 33 Right-click the view. and click View Properties. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and open Metric\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_m. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. and click Activate View. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. scroll down. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 29 Right click the view. 32 In the Instance Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. select Crop View and Section Box. and under Extents. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. specify 1 : 2 for the scale. Place a detail component. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Deactivate View. clear Crop Region Visible.

354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. as the rectangle start point. 4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. 12 On the Element panel. Click OK. and click Properties. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. right-click the view name. For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. click the point at the top of the drain. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. as shown. 9 Zoom in to the component. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. For Scale. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. select Documentation.Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. for Sub-Discipline. Click OK. select 1 : 5. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). and select M_Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. 3 In the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. select Plumbing.

Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 500 x 140. Concrete. 18 With the filled region still selected. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Type.P. 21 In the drawing area. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. and click OK. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . 15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 22 Click Modify.I. and then press Esc. select C.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 20 Select 1.

25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 31 On the Options Bar. and then click to select them. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. 30 Click Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 23 In the drawing area. select the filled region. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 34 Press Esc. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. (Line). 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 40 Click Finish Region.35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew.

47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. (Rectangle).Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 45 Using the method learned previously.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. as shown. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and then click to select them. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. enter Flashing Membrane_F. press Tab to highlight the chain. and click OK. 49 Click Modify. draw wide detail lines as shown. 52 In the Create Group dialog.. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. select the Flashing Membrane group.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. as shown. and add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. press Spacebar twice. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 58 Select M_Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. 55 Press Esc. as shown.

as shown. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline.62 Press Esc twice. 64 Press Esc twice. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Leader and Free End. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and use the grips to resize the masking region. 67 On the Options Bar. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.

79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 100mm Flange. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Mechanical) ➤ 15100 ➤ 15150 ➤ 15150. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.70 In the Keynotes dialog. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 80 Press Esc twice. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. and then click OK. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 72 If necessary. 78 Move the cursor to the left. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 81 Select the text note.A2 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 71 Click Modify. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. select 15000 (Division 15 . and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 76 To select the leader start point. and click to specify the text insertion point. and click to specify the second leader point. Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right).

83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . click to select the slab lines in the order indicated.

select the view title.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. open P103 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. and click to place it. and then press Esc twice. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. Drafting Detail Components | 363 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 90 Press Esc. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.

364 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful